Chrysler LLC
81-026-0952
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2009 ASPEN
ASPEN
2009 OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................79
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 199
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................271
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................367
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................383
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................435
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................449
10
INDEX
....................................................................459
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
4 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ............. 14
m Ignition And Steering Lock ................ 14
▫ Ignition Accessory Delay Feature .......... 15
m Sentry Keyt ........................... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
▫ General Information.................... 18
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped ........ 19
▫ To Set The Alarm...................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System .................. 19
m Illuminated Entry ....................... 20
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . 20
m Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ............... 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ........... 22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
2
▫ General Information.................... 25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ....... 25
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 27
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 28
m Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks .................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks ..................... 30
▫ Child Protection Door Lock .............. 33
m Windows ............................. 34
▫ Power Windows ...................... 34
▫ Auto Down .......................... 35
▫ Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s And Front Passenger Door Only) .... 36
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 36
m Liftgate .............................. 37
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped ............ 38
m Occupant Restraints ..................... 40
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 41
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 46
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped.......................... 47
▫ Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three
Point Belt — If Equipped ................ 47
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners .................. 50
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertt).......................... 50
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ........... 52
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 52
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—Airbags ....................... 53
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 62
▫ Child Restraint ....................... 64
m Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 73
m Safety Tips ............................ 74
▫ Exhaust System ....................... 74
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 75
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle ............................. 76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position and remove the key.
Ignition Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For external door lock lubrication, refer to
“Body Lubrication” in Section 7.
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide antitheft protection for your ve-
hicle. If the steering wheel is locked, it may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. The key can be
inserted or withdrawn only in the LOCK position. Push
in on the key in the ignition lock cylinder to rotate to the
LOCK position.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The key cannot be turned to LOCK until the shift
lever is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull
the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the
LOCK position.
NOTE: The steering wheel will lock when the key is
removed, and when the steering wheel is turned around
115 degrees clockwise or 65 degrees counterclockwise
from the center position.
Ignition Accessory Delay Feature
The power window switches, radio, hands–free system
(if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), the time for this feature is pro-
grammable. For details, refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)”/“KEY OFF
POWER DELAY > OFF” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
SENTRY KEYT
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keyst,
or any other transponder-equipped components on
the same key chain will not cause a key-related
(transponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used when
starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF
electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Keyt is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keyst from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Keyt Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keyst, you can program
new Sentry Keyst to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Keyt Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15
seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Keyt into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on
again for three seconds and then turn off.
The new Sentry Keyt is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Keyt, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Keyt system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, and
ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Security
Alarm System is activated, the system provides both
audible and visual signals. The horn will sound repeat-
edly for three minutes and the headlights and security
light in the instrument cluster will flash for an additional
15 minutes. The engine will not run until the system is
disarmed.
To Set the Alarm:
The Security Alarm System will set when you use the
power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
closed and locked, the security light in the instrument
cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is
arming. The security light in the instrument panel cluster
will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to indicate that the
alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the security light
will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is
armed.
NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during
vehicle operation, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to unlock the
doors. If something has triggered the system in your
absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Security Alarm System will also disarm if the vehicle
is started with a programmed Sentry Keyt. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Keyt is used to start a vehicle, the
engine will start and run for two seconds and then shut
down. After six unsuccessul attempts at starting the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
engine, the system will shut down until the correct key is
used. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE UNLOCK
button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry
Keyt.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the Security
Alarm System (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering
the vehicle without using the key fob to unlock the
door(s). The Security Alarm System can be disarmed
with the key fob’s UNLOCK button or by inserting a
programmed Sentry Keyt into the ignition and turning
the key to the ON position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
NOTE:
•
For the remote starting feature (if equipped), refer to
“Remote Starting System” in section 2.
•
For the power liftgate feature (if equipped), refer to the
“Power Liftgate” in section 2.
•
Your vehicle’s transmitter may have three, four, or five
buttons (shown), depending on the optional features
purchased with your vehicle.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
minimum of 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld radio Trans-
mitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash twice.
Transmitter with Integrated Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by following these
procedures:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Over-
head Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors and liftgate. If the ignition is OFF when the
doors are locked, the parking lights will flash once and
the horn will chirp once.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature will be activated when shipped
from the assembly plants. If desired, this feature can be
disabled by following these procedures:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Over-
head Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the transmitter.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within six seconds.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle
by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lights with Lock Programming
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Over-
head Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the transmit-
ter.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within six seconds.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the flash lights with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the security alarm.
Opening a door with the security alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the security alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the PANIC mode, while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter
once. When the PANIC mode is activated, the interior
lights will illuminate, the head lights and parking lights
will flash and the horn will sound.
To cancel the PANIC mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. PANIC mode
will automatically cancel after three minutes or if the
vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During
the PANIC mode, the door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry system will function normally. PANIC mode will
not disarm the security alarm system on vehicles so
equipped.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your transmitter fails to operate from a normal dis-
tance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter, such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plant with
two transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A
total of eight transmitters can be programmed for a
vehicle. Additional transmitters can be programmed to
the vehicle by using a transmitter currently programmed
to the vehicle.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that trans-
mitter, all other programmed transmitters will be erased
and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the following procedure to program additional trans-
mitters:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
2. Fasten your seat belt. Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the transmit-
ter.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully
entered program mode. All transmitters that are to be
programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when
the chime was heard.
8. Using the transmitter to be programmed, press and
release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simulta-
neously.
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
11. A single chime will be heard.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional transmitters.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed transmitters should function
normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
1. If the transmitter is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Separating Transmitter Halves
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test transmitter operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 ft (91 m) away from
the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry key fob
which is part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate,
and all the doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START
button on the key fob twice within five seconds. To
indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly (if
programmed).
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
START button once.
Remote Start Transmitter
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the (RKE) transmitter. Then, prior to
the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position,
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto-
matically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After
either of these conditions, or if the Security Alarm System
is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed, the
vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the
ignition and moving it to the RUN position, then back to
LOCK.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside
by pushing down the door lock plunger, located at the
rear of the door. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave unattended children alone in a ve-
hicle. Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition and any front door is open, the power
Power Door Lock Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Automatic Door Lock Programming
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by follow-
ing these procedures:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Over-
head Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position a minimum of four times,
ending in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be disabled. If neces-
sary, repeat the above procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened (excluding the liftgate). This will
occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the
PARK position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted
out of PARK and all doors closed).
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (LOCK or UNLOCK).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped
Customer programming sequence to enable or disable
the Auto Unlock feature:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Over-
head Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position a minimum of four times,
ending in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-
sary, repeat the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
Power Window Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature (ten-minute
delay) can be programmed On or Off by your authorized
dealer. If the vehicle is equipped with an Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC, the customer can
program this feature On or Off. For details, refer to
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto Down
The driver’s and front passenger window switch has an
Auto Down feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto Down movement,
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only)
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting the Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Pull the window switch up and close the window com-
pletely, then pull and hold the switch for one second.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lockout switch. To enable the window controls,
press the window lockout switch again.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Transmitter or by activating the power door
lock switches located on the front doors.
NOTE: When the engine is running from a remote start
(if equipped), the vehicle must first be unlocked by
pressing the remote transmitter UNLOCK button prior to
activating the power liftgate; otherwise, the engine will
stop automatically.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, pull the exterior handle and open the
liftgate with one fluid motion.
Window Lockout Switch
Power Liftgate Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is in
gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE: If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with
a powered liftgate, pressing the button on the RKE
Transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area. The liftgate will re-lock automatically within
10 seconds once the liftgate is closed.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the RKE Transmitter. Press the power
liftgate button on the RKE Transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the power liftgate button twice
within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
When the RKE Transmitter power liftgate button is
pressed two times and the “Lamp Flash” feature is
enabled, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing.
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
switch located on the overhead console.
Power Liftgate Switch
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open position in
order to power close. If the liftgate is not fully open,
press the RKE Transmitter or overhead console button
to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close.
•
If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
•
If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below 222°F (230°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
•
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
passenger, and left and right side curtain airbags for the
driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you
will be carrying children too small for adult-size seat
belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature (refer to the
“Child Restraint” in this section), can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colli-
sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. And a belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If the front airbags are deployed the front
pretensioning retractors must be replaced.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the
anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in the desired position. Pull the seatback
forward to ensure that it is locked in the upright position.
WARNING!
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the automatic locking mode any time a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in
the rear seat whenever possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear 60/40 Seat Third Row Center Three Point
Belt — If Equipped
The center three point seat belt for the third row rear seat
may be disconnected to allow the 60% seatback to easily
fold down. The keyed buckle latch plate (small latch plate
at the end of the belt) can be detached from the keyed
seat belt buckle (buckle without a red release button)
located on the left inboard side of the third row bench
seat. Insert the ignition key into the center white slot on
the keyed buckle. The small latchplate can be removed
when the key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the
retractor to take up the surplus webbing, and insert the
latch plates into the slots in the headliner for storage
while the 60% seatback is folded down.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
If the small (keyed buckle) latch plate and keyed
buckle are not properly connected when the seat
belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not
be able to provide the proper restraint and will
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
•
When reattaching the small (keyed buckle) latch
plate and keyed buckle, ensure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach the small
latch plate from the keyed buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the small latch plate and
keyed buckle.
Third Row Center Seat Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
To reattach the seat belt to the third row center seat, pull
the small (keyed buckle) latch plate forward from the
headliner slots and insert it into the keyed buckle until
there is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for
the proper seat belt usage.
Third Row Center Seat Belt
Headliner Stowage Slots
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertT)
If the driver seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlertt) will alert the driver to buckle their
seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is
triggered, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt)
will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning
Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will
be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Once the warning is triggered, it can be paused if the
vehicle speed drops below 5 mph (8 km/h). The warning
will be restarted if the vehicle speed becomes greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. The manufacturer does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlertt).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt. DO NOT start the engine or
press the TRIP RESET button.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the seat belt Warning Light to turn off. If during this
time, the seat belt becomes unbuckled or the engine is
cranked or started, programming will be cancelled.
3. Unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt
three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled. A chime will sound immediately (once the
feature has toggled). If during this time the ignition
switch is turned out of the ON position or the timer
expires, programming mode will be cancelled.
4. Programming mode will be cancelled after the feature
has toggled with the seat belt still buckled or if the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position or 10
seconds after the feature has toggled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) can be reac-
tivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlertt) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag
covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle is also equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. The window bags are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployments.
1 - Airbag 2 - Knee Bolster
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Your vehicle is equipped with window bags. Do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. Window
bags will also deploy on rollover events. But even in
collisions where the airbags work, you need the seat belts
to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to
protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window. Airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Refer to 9If You Need Customer Assis-
tance9 in Section 9.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Window Bags above Side Windows
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will
detect a roll over when equipped with side airbags.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not “on” and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument cluster for 2.5 to 8
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the AIR-
BAG warning light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity. The steer-
ing wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way
as the airbags inflate to their full size. The airbags fully
inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The
passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions or in a roll over
event. When the ORC (with side impact option) de-
tects a collision or roll over requiring the window bags
to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. Both window bags will inflate in a roll over
event. Aquantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the window bag. The inflating window bag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the window bag inflates.
This especially applies to children. The window bag is
only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
NOTE: At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS-related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by the manufacturer/Mopart.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically, the engine
will shut off and the hazard lights will turn on. In
addition, approximately five seconds after the vehicle has
stopped moving, the interior lights will light until the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 2.5 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned ON.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 2.5 to 8
seconds interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse
block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuse Block” in Section 7.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment and up to a
quarter-second of high-speed deceleration data during
and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY
recorded if an airbag deploys and are otherwise unavail-
able.
NOTE:
1. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by the manufacturer and others to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by the manufac-
turer, such investigations may be requested by custom-
ers, insurance carriers, government officials, and profes-
sional crash researchers, such as those associated with
universities, and with hospital and insurance organiza-
tions.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by the
manufacturer (regardless of initiative), the company or
its designated representative will first obtain permission
of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
Acopy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S.Government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by the
manufacturer to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a the manufac-
turer’s product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data parameters that may be recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) status (if
equipped)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12
years and under should ride properly buckled up in a
rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Infants and Small Children
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (Refer to
“LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System” in this
section.)
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System” in this section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe
injuries or be fatal to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The second row seating positions and all third row
seats have either cinching latch plates or an automatic
locking retractor. These are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s second row seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are
now available. However, because the lower anchorages
are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint
systems having attachments for those anchorages will
continue to also have features for installation using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps
and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages
have been available for some time. For some older child
restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer
add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to
take advantage of all the available attachments provided
with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three second row seating positions have lower an-
chorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted
lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attach-
ments must be installed in the outboard positions only.
Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can
only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint System” in this section.
Second Row Seat Left Side
Second Row Seat Right Side
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages behind each second row seating position
located on the back of the seat. Many, but not all restraint
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each
side, with each having a hook or connector for attach-
ment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting
the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints
and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the
tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age located on the back of the seat, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that
the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with,
and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode” in this section.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Child Restraints in Third Row Seating (If
Equipped)
For vehicles equipped with third row split bench (60/40)
seating, the tether strap anchorage is located on the
seatback behind the center seating position. The hooks in
the rear floor are NOT designed to withstand the forces
that may occur during a crash.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap. Children and infants are safer when properly
restrained in a child restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
Second Row Seat Tether Anchors
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
There are tether strap anchorages behind each seating
position in the second row and behind the center seating
position in the case of the third row seat (60/40) split
bench, if equipped. To install child restraint tether an-
chors, follow these instructions:
1. Place the child restraint in the center seating position
of the third row of seats.
2. Route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two headrest posts.
Third Row Seat Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the tether anchor located on the seatback and remove the
slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap. For instructions, refer
to “Child Restraint Tether Anchor” in this section.
See your authorized dealer for help if necessary.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex-
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following
precautions should be observed:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for more than a short period. If
so, adjust your climate control system to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed and the controls in any position except OFF
or RECIRC.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system,
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle, or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
Check for proper airflow through all defroster ducts. If
there are any question regarding the operation of your
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the
belt.
Airbag Light
The Airbag light should come on and remain on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see
your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag
light, the seat belt light will flash.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected, the cause should be located and corrected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors .............................. 84
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 84
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 84
▫ Outside Mirrors....................... 85
▫ Outside Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 85
▫ Power Mirrors ........................ 85
▫ Automatic Dimming Driver’s Outside Mirror
— If Equipped........................ 87
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 87
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .... 88
m Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)
— If Equipped.......................... 88
▫ Operation ........................... 90
▫ Phone Call Features .................... 97
▫ UConnectt System Features ............. 100
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 105
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnectt System.................... 106
3
▫ General Information................... 115
m
Voice Recognition System (VR) — If Equipped
.. 115
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 115
▫ Commands ......................... 116
▫ Voice Training ....................... 119
m Seats ............................... 120
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment ........... 120
▫ Manual Front Seat Recliners ............. 120
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
— If Equipped....................... 121
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions ........................... 121
▫ Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat
— If Equipped....................... 122
▫ Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat
— If Equipped....................... 123
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............. 123
▫ Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold And
Tumble ............................ 125
▫ Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold And
Tumble ............................ 127
▫ Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped ...... 131
▫ Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped.... 133
m Driver Memory System — If Equipped ...... 136
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory ................ 137
▫ Memory Position Recall ................ 138
▫ To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory ........................... 138
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Self-Limiting Control .................. 139
▫ Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control.... 139
m To Open And Close The Hood ............. 140
m Lights .............................. 142
▫ Headlight Switch ..................... 142
▫ Interior Lights ....................... 144
▫ Battery Saver........................ 145
▫ Illuminated Entry .................... 146
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .... 146
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 146
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 147
▫ Multifunction Lever ................... 148
m Windshield Wipers And Washers ........... 150
▫ Windshield Wipers ................... 150
▫ Windshield Washers................... 151
m Tilt Steering Column ................... 152
m Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ..... 153
▫ Adjustment ......................... 154
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ...... 155
▫ To Activate ......................... 156
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 156
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 156
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 156
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 157
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ............... 157
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
m Rear Park Assist System — If Equipped ...... 158
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ............... 158
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display ......... 159
▫
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
. . 162
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist System ....... 162
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ...... 163
m Rear Backup Camera — If Equipped ........ 163
m Overhead Console ..................... 165
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ............... 165
m Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped..... 166
▫ Dome/Reading Lights ................. 166
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped....................... 167
▫ Compass/Temperature Button ........... 173
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 176
▫ Programming HomeLinkt .............. 177
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming ..... 180
▫ Using HomeLinkt .................... 181
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkt
Button ............................ 181
▫ Security ........................... 181
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 182
▫ General Information................... 182
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............. 183
▫ Express Open Feature ................. 183
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 184
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sunroof Maintenance .................. 185
m Electrical Power Outlets ................. 185
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
(Battery Fed Configuration) ............. 186
m 115 Volt Inverter Outlet — If Equipped ...... 188
m Floor Console ........................ 189
▫ Front Floor Console Features ............ 189
▫ Rear Floor Console Features — If Equipped . . 192
m Cargo Area Features — If Equipped ......... 193
m Rear Window Features .................. 195
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 195
▫ Rear Window Defrosting ............... 196
m Factory Installed Roof Luggage Rack ........ 197
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be
adjusted while set in the day position (toward the wind-
shield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
mirror. A light in the button will indicate when the
Day/Night Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dimming feature is activated. This option also controls
the driver side mirror when it is equipped with auto
dimming glass.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Folding outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
Power Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward either
the left (L) or right (R) position.
Using the control wand, tilt the mirror into the desired
position. When you have finished adjusting the mirror,
turn the control wand to the center position (O). The
center position prevents the accidental movement of the
mirror.
Power Mirror Control
Mirror Directions
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right side mirror.
Automatic Dimming Driver’s Outside Mirror — If
Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying light
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside mirror and can be turned off by pressing the
button at the base of the inside mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Heated mirrors are automatically activated when you
depress the rear window defroster switch located on the
instrument panel. The light will illuminate to indicate
that the heating elements are on. Turning off the rear
window defroster or the ignition will deactivate the
heated mirrors.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and rotate the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on and off
automatically.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT)—
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios
contain an integrated Hands-Free Communication
(UConnectt) system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for UConnectt system operating instructions
for these radios.
UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnectt system.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The UConnectt system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetootht9Hands-Free Profile,9 Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnectt website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnectt customer support, visit the
following websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnectt phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetootht
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnectt features
Bluetootht technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnectt works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnectt system. The UConnectt system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetootht cellular phone. See the
UConnectt website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnectt
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt
system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnectt system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
prompt.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnectt system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following
the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetootht enabled cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnectt website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnectt system
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnectt system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnectt system. The priority allows the
UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9 in this section).
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnectt system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to 9Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook,9 in
this section.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnectt allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetootht. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetootht…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetootht
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetootht OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetootht,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetootht link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetootht connection to
the UConnectt system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetootht. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetootht connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9
feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnectt system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
•
After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
•
The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say 9Call.9
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
•
The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to 9Toggling Between Calls9 in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to 9Conference Call9 in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under 9Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
•
The UConnectt system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnectt system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnectt system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnectt system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnectT System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnectt system is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnectt system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnectt system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnectt
system.
When calling a number with your UConnectt system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 93746#Send.9 Saying a number, or sequence of
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, followed by 9Send,9 is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnectt system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetootht cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute off.9
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnectt system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to the
UConnectt system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recog-
nition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnectt System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetootht
connection between a UConnectt paired cellular phone
and the UConnectt system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnectt system.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnectt system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT
System
UConnectt Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnectt Tutorial.”
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
9Setup, Voice Training9 command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnectt phonebook.
•
The UConnectt phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
•
You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnectt system.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetootht Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetootht ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnectt Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak into
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as
possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to
recognize user voice commands may be negatively af-
fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and you can add or change commands. This will become
helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Global commands are available at all times.
Local commands are available if the supported radio
mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
•
DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
•
MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
•
NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
•
PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous chan-
nel)
•
LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
•
SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
TRACK (#) (to change the track)
•
NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
•
PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You continue by saying one of the following
commands:
−
SAVE (to save the memo)
−
CONTINUE (to continue recording)
−
DELETE (to delete the recording)
•
PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hard-
key to stop playing memos. You continue by saying
one of the following commands:
−
REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
−
NEXT (to play the next memo)
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
−
PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
−
DELETE (to delete a memo)
•
DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnectt System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seat Recliners
The bucket seats are equipped with recliners. The reclin-
ing mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
Manual Seat Adjuster
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the driver’s seat and on the left side
of the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever
fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.
Adjustable Head Restraints — All Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
Lumbar Support Adjustment Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
To lower the head restraint, depress the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
Eight-Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the left
side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The bottom
switch controls up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt
adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline
adjustment.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Power Seat Switch Location
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Four-Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the right side of the passenger seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
NOTE: The four-way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver, passenger, and second
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the instrument panel below the climate con-
trols.
After turning ON the ignition, Press the switch once to
select High level heating. Press the switch a second time
to select Low level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut Off the heating elements. Amber indicators in the
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicators
will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for Off.
Front Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
The controls for the second row heated seats are located
on the center console between the second row seats.
NOTE: The High level setting will operate for approxi-
mately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the system will
automatically transition to the Low level setting. The
Low level setting will operate for 30 minutes, then the
system will turn Off.
If the Low level setting is initially selected, the system
will operate for 30 minutes and then turn off.
If the indicator light on the heated seat switch does not
light, an indicator blinks when the switch is depressed or
if the heated seats do not operate, the system should be
serviced by a qualified technician.
Second Row Heated Seats Switches
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Second Row Bucket Seats — Fold and Tumble
Second row bucket seats have seatback recliners on both
seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seatback to
be reclined an additional 11 degrees.
The second row bucket seats can be folded and tumbled
forward for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo
area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward posi-
tion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
3. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and push the seatback forward.
4. Pull up on the release handle and lift to tumble the
seat fully forward. If the seat contacts the rear of the front
seat, move the front seat forward.
To re-latch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then, lift the
seatback release lever and pull the seatback up to return
it to its full upright position.
Folding The Seatback
Tumbling the Seat Forward
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold and tumble the second row seats from the third
row fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to fold the
seatback. Continue lifting the lever to release the floor
latches to tumble the seat.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Second Row 40/20/40 Seat — Fold and Tumble
The 40/20/40 seat configuration is standard on all mod-
els. This seat is equipped with a unique fold-and-tumble
feature. The 40% seatbacks have spring loaded hinges
which assist with the folding of the seatbacks.
Tumble Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
Second row leather seats have seatback recliners at the
40% seating positions. Raising the lever allows the seat-
back to be reclined an additional 11 degrees.
To fold the 40% seatbacks, fully raise the lever on the side
of the seat to release the seatback. The seatback can now
be folded into the down position for use as a cargo floor,
or the seat can now be tumbled forward to allow access
to the rear of the vehicle.
Fold, Tumble And Recline Lever
Rear 20% Seat Pull Strap
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold the 20% seatback, pull the strap forward to release
the seatback. Fold the seatback down for use as an
armrest or to carry cargo. When returning the seatback to
the upright position, push the seatback rearward to latch
the seatback. Pull the seatback forward to ensure that it is
locked in the upright position.
WARNING!
The 20% seatback contains the center shoulder belt.
A 20% seatback that is not fully latched in the
upright position will not protect you properly.
To tumble the 40% seat, fully raise the lever on the side of
the seat to release the floor latches and tumble the seat.
Fold, Tumble And Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the outer 40% second
row seats in the tumbled position. The outer 40%
second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for
entry and exit to the third row seat. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in personal injury.
NOTE: The seatback must be fully folded into the down
position to allow the lever to be raised enough to release
the floor latches.
To fold and tumble the second row 40% seats from the
third row, fully raise the lever at the rear of the seat to
fold the seatback. Continue raising the lever to release the
floor latches to tumble the seat.
NOTE: The head restraints must be lowered but do not
have to be removed to fold and tumble the seats.
Tumble Lever
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Seat Bench — If Equipped
To Fold the Seats
Folding the third seat occurs in two stages: First, the
cushion is lifted and moved forward from the pockets at
the front of the cushion. The cushion will rest on the floor
directly behind the second row seat. Second, the top of
the back is folded forward and rests on the cushion. The
back will not fold unless the cushion has been folded
forward first.
Seat Cushion Pockets
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
CAUTION!
When loading cargo into the rear of your vehicle with
the third row seat folded flat, be careful not to
damage the material on the head restraints.
Seat Cushion Movement Up And Forward
Third Row Seat Folded Forward
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The seat belt buckles are hinged to fold with the
seatback.
WARNING!
•
Do not sit in the third row seat unless the cushion
and back are properly engaged. Proper engage-
ment can be verified by pushing/pulling on the
upright seatback. The seatback will not move
unless properly engaged.
•
Do not sit in the third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded or tumbled. In a collision,
you could slide under the seat belt and be seri-
ously or even fatally injured.
Third Row 60/40 Folding — If Equipped
Third Row Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Third Row Seat 40% Seatback Fold
Third Row Seat Features
1 — Seatback Return Strap
2 — Seatback Release Lever
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Seat Folded Forward Third Row Seat Return Pull Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
DRIVER MEMORY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat
position, driver’s outside mirror position, adjustable
brake, accelerator pedals position, Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) temperature setting and radio station
preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitters can also be programmed to recall the same
positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked
to either of the two memory positions.
Memory Buttons
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE
Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store new settings.
1. Turn the vehicle key to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and both sideview
mirrors to the desired positions.
NOTE: Not all motors may be moved at one time. Refer
to the eight-way power seat description in this section.
3. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
4. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
5. Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
while the ATC is in Auto mode.
6. Press and release the SET button located on the
driver’s door.
7. Within five seconds, press and release memory button
1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next steps must be
performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
8. Turn the vehicle off and remove the key.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position using the other numbered memory button or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
•
The driver’s seat belt must be unbuckled to recall
memory positions.
•
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions.
•
Not all motors may be moved at one time. Please refer
to the eight-way power seat description in this section.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or
pressing any one of the power seat buttons, pressing the
adjustable pedals button, or pressing either the LOCK or
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter when not in the
ignition switch. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s
seat, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
NOTE: A chime sound may be heard if Setting Memory
was inhibited for any reason.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release the memory SET button located on
the driver’s door.
3. Within 10 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
memory position, repeat steps 1-3 for each RKE transmit-
ter.
NOTE: The capability to link RKE transmitters to
memory is enabled when delivered from the factory. The
capability to link RKE transmitters to memory can be
disabled (or later re-enabled) by a qualified Chrysler LLC
representative. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic
vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
Self-Limiting Control
To improve vehicle reliability, the memory system in-
cludes a self-limiting control for full travel positioning of
power seat and adjustable pedal movement (all direc-
tions). This self-limiting control may, however, develop
an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is
encountered sometime during usage. One example of
such an occurrence may include a box or package ob-
structing the full rearward movement of the driver’s seat.
Once the obstruction is removed, the self-limiting control
may be restored to maximum position. The self-limiting
control may be restored by first reaching the recently
limited or obstructed position, then release and reactivate
the same button or buttons. Continued seat travel beyond
the obstructed position will indicate the recently encoun-
tered self-limitation has been cleared.
Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control
This additional feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of
and into the vehicle. The seat cushion will move rear-
ward approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move
forward approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is
placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
position. Each stored memory setting will have an asso-
ciated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position. The Easy Exit
and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if
the seat is positioned rearward enough and there is no
benefit in moving the seat any farther rearward.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). For
details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features)” under “Overhead Console with Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped”
in Section 3.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released:
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the safety latch lever to the left. It is located
between the grille and hood opening right of the center.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
NOTE: Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip
before closing hood to prevent damaging the grille.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Hood Safety Catch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Headlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel
Lights
The headlight switch is located next to the steering
wheel, on the left side of the instrument panel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the head-
lights, automatic headlights (if equipped), parking lights
and instrument panel lights.
Headlight Switch Location
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotating the headlight switch clockwise to the first
position will turn on the parking lights, taillights, side
marker lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights. To turn on the headlights, rotate the switch clock-
wise into the second position.
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
•
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
•
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
•
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Automatic headlights can be activated by rotating the
rotary headlight switch to the symbol “A.” The head-
lights will turn on when the engine is running and the
ambient light sensor indicates that the headlights should
be activated. The headlights will turn off if the headlight
switch is rotated to the OFF position or 90 seconds after
the ignition is turned to OFF.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
cycled off while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 90 seconds. Headlight delay can be canceled by
either turning the headlight switch ON then OFF or by
turning the ignition ON.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Overhead Console
with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped” in Section 3.
Interior Lights
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
9Parade9 mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to
the second upward detent position or when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all of the way
down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to
go out. This allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for eight
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
NOTE: While the engine is running, the system will
deactivate the fog lights and heated seats if a low battery
system voltage is detected.
Illuminated Entry
The headlights turn will turn on for 90 seconds when the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed.
The illuminated entry time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Overhead Console
with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped” in Section 3.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is not in PARK.
This provides a constant “Lights ON” condition until the
ignition is turned OFF or the transmission returned to
PARK. The lights illuminate at reduced intensity. If the
parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights
(DRLs) will turn off. If the headlights are activated, the
DRL feature will transition to the normal headlight
operating mode.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights or courtesy lights are left
on after the ignition is turned OFF, a continuous fast
chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light, headlight or Auto
position and pressing the fog light button.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pressed in, when the head-
light switch is rotated to the OFF position or the high
beam is selected.
Fog Light Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or down to signal a left turn.
The turn signal indicator located in the instrument cluster
will flash indicating the direction of the turn, and proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an
indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunc-
tion lever partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least 1mile
(1 km), a continuous chime will sound.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multifunction lever once and the turn signal (left
or right) will flash three times, and automatically turn off.
Signaling Turns
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will momentarily turn on the high beams
until the multifunction lever is released.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam.
High Beam/Low Beam
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a cycle every 2 seconds to approxi-
mately 15 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph
(16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Wiper Switch
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE:
•
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield.
•
If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the
9Park9 position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wipers will resume operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push in on the washer
knob on the end of the multifunction lever. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the knob is held.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. The wipers will then resume the
intermittent interval that was previously selected. If the
washer knob is pushed for a period greater than one
second while in the off position, the wiper will wipe
approximately three wipes after the wash knob is re-
leased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
NOTE: To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that
meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
This rating information can be found on most washer
fluid containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature will allow you to raise or lower the steering
wheel into a desired position. To tilt the column, pull
rearward on the lever below the turn signal control and
move the wheel up or down as desired. Push the lever
forward to lock the column firmly in place.
Washer Fluid Switch
Tilt Steering Column Lever
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals. The adjustable pedals
switch is located on the left side of the steering column on
the instrument panel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 in
(254 mm) away from the airbag located in the center of
the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, up to
move the pedals toward the driver or down to move the
pedals away from the driver.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the speed control is SET.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are
located on the steering wheel. When engaged, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation
at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — Resume 4 — Set
2 — Cancel 5 — Cruise
3 — Decel 6 — On/Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates to
indicate that the system is on.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control has been designed
to shut down if multiple speed control buttons (i.e., SET
and CANCEL) are operated simultaneously in order to
ensure proper operation. The Electronic Speed Control
can be reactivated by pushing the speed control ON/OFF
button and reestablishing the desired vehicle SET speed.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
Asoft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF but-
ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases
the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON, the
speed can be increased by pressing and holding the
RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button is released, a
new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the
button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph (4.8
km/h).
To decrease the speed while the Electronic Speed Control
is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the
button when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 ft
(610 m), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially
when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed.
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h), the
Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW/HAUL button lo-
cated at the end of the shift lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides visible and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning
Section and Note Section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist system will remember the last
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position.
The Rear Park Assist system can be active only when the
shift lever is in REVERSE. If the Rear Park Assist system
is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will be
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
mately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will be
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12
to 79 in (30 to 200 cm) from the rear fascia in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visible and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
When the ignition is turned to the ON position, the
warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for approxi-
mately one second. Each side of the warning display has
six yellow and two red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the
obstacle when the red LED is ON.
The system dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and there are no obstacles being
detected. The following chart shows the warning display
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Park Assist LED Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Inner LED 79 in (200 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
1st LED 51.1 in (130 cm) Yellow None
2nd LED 45.2 in (115 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red Yes, Intermittent
7th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.81 in (30 cm) Red Yes, Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be-
fore backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surround-
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
CAUTION!
•
The Rear Park Assist system is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Ob-
stacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist system to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver look over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist system.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
Park Assist system, such as when towing a trailer.
The system can be turned ON or OFF through the
Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) – if equipped.
Refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Overhead Console with Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in
Section 3.
Service The Rear Park Assist System
When the Rear Park Assist System is defective, the EVIC
will display the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM”
message along with a single chime once per ignition
cycle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual. The Park Assist
display will also light the red led’s indicating a problem.
Under this condition the Rear Park Assist System will not
operate.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ing sure the rear bumper is clean, please see your
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths.
Do not scratch or poke the sensors, you could damage the
sensors.
REAR BACKUP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera
system that allows you to see an on-screen image (located
in the screen of your Radio) of the rear of your vehicle
whenever it is put into REVERSE. The camera is located
in the light bar over the rear license plate.
NOTE: Refer to “Setting Display Properties” under
“System Settings” in the Navigation User’s Manual for
instructions regarding navigation screen brightness ad-
justments.
Use the following steps to access the Rear Camera
feature:
1. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal and place the shift lever into
REVERSE.
NOTE: The camera view will display only while the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
3. Wait one to two seconds and the camera view will
display on the radio screen.
4. Perform a visual check of the rear area.
NOTE: CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before
backing up.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
5. Slowly backup as necessary.
6. Place the shift lever into PARK or DRIVE to exit the
Rear Camera system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Camera system
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear
Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Sys-
tem to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver look fre-
quently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear
Camera System.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
There are two reading lights and one courtesy light
located near the front of the console.
All lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped. The two round
lamps are also operated individually as reading lights by
pressing the center of each lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
turn off after 15 minutes.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC
VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF
EQUIPPED
The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, and
an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Dome/Reading Lights
Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading
lights.
The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door is
opened or when the interior lights are turned on by
rotating the dimmer control located on the headlight
switch.
The reading lights are activated by pressing the center of
each lens.
NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped
Pressing the MENU button will change the
display to one of the following features:
Trip Functions
Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through
one of the following Trip Function features:
•
TRIP – Shows the total distance traveled since the last
reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the
RESET button.
•
ELAPSED TIME – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START
positions.
•
UNIT IN U.S./METRIC – Press the RESET button to
toggle between U.S. and METRIC.
Overhead Console with EVIC
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
•
AVG. MPG – Shows the average fuel economy since
the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the
history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading
before the reset. (Example: If your EVIC displays 18
AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the
previous averaging history will be erased and the
display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG.
MPG). The display may take several miles/kilometers
for the value to change, depending upon driving
habits. If equipped with a 5.7L engine and Multi
Displacement System (MDS), FUEL SAVER may be
displayed along with the actual AVG. MPG. If
equipped with MDS option, the EVIC will display
FUEL SAVER when in fuel economy mode.
•
MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) – Shows the
estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel
remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of fuel economy,
according to the current fuel tank level. MI TO EMPTY
cannot be reset through the RESET button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Global Reset – If the RESET button is pressed twice
within two seconds while in any of the three resettable
displays (AVG. MPG, ET (ELAPSED TIME) and TRIP),
all three displays will be reset.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
System Status (EVIC Displays)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning
chime)
•
PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE – Vehicle
not in PARK
•
LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
•
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph/1 km/h)
•
DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime)
•
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with a single chime)
•
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime)
•
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
•
COOLANT LOW
•
LIFTGATE OPEN
•
CHECK TPM SYSTEM (with single chime) (Premium
TPM System Only)
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans-
mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT
AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until the
Personal Settings displays on the EVIC.
Use the STEP button to display one of the following:
•
“LANGUAGE” – When in this display, you may select
one of several different languages for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the
RESET button while in this display to select your
preferred language. Then, as you continue, the infor-
mation will display in the selected language.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“AUTO DOOR LOCK > ON” – When ON is selected,
all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > ON” – When ON is
selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st” – When DRV DR 1st is
selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the RKE UNLOCK button. When Driver Door
1st Press is selected, you must press the Remote
Keyless Entry UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “DRV DR 1st ” appears.
•
“RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST” – When All ALL DR
1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“All DR 1st” appears.
•
MEM. RECALL WITH RKE > ON – When ON is
selected, pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE
will recall the memory settings for the seat, mirror and
radio. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON9 or “OFF” appears.
•
“SOUND HORN W/LOCK > ON” – When ON is
selected, a short horn sound will occur when the
Remote Keyless Entry LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
•
“FLASH LAMPS W/LOCK >ON” – When ON is
selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Trans-
mitter. This feature may be selected with or without
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
•
“HEADLAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC” – When this
feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the
headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
NOTE: The headlamp switch must be in the “A” auto
mode before this feature will work.
•
HEADLAMPS W/WIPERS > ON – When ON is
selected, the headlamps will automatically turn on
when the wiper switch is activated.
•
EASY EXIT SEAT > ON – When ON is selected, and
the key is removed from the ignition, the driver’s seat
will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit.
•
TILT MIRRORS IN “R” > ON – When ON is selected,
and the transmission is put in REVERSE, the outside
mirrors will tilt downward.
•
“KEY OFF POWER DELAY> OFF” – When this feature
is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands–
free system (if equipped), and power outlets will
remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will
cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5
min.,” “10 min.” appears.
•
“ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF” – When this feature
is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on
for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the RKE Transmitter. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,”
“60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
•
PARK ASST. SYSTEM > ON – When YES is selected,
the Rear Park Assist System is activated. When NO is
selected, the System is deactivated.
•
“UNIT IN > U.S./METRIC” – The EVIC odometer can
be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
•
“COMPASS VARIANCE > 8” – Press the RESET
button to change the compass variance setting. Set this
to your current location. If you change location,
change your variance according to your variance on
the variance map. Refer to Compass Variance Map in
this section.
•
“COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES” – Press the RESET
button to manually calibrate the compass. Refer to
Manual Compass Calibration in this section.
Compass/Temperature Button
Pressing the Compass/Temperature button
will return the display to the normal compass/
temperature display.
NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be affected from heat
soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a
speed greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for several min-
utes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which reduces the need
to calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h) (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” is displayed.
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass YES”
is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the
calibration. The message “CAL” will display on the
compass temperature screen in the EVIC.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h)
in a complete 360°circle, (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” is displayed.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” is
displayed.
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the variance map.
5. Press and release the Compass/Temperature button
to exit.
Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLinkt buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLinkt channels.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLinkt Buttons
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Programming HomeLinkT
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLinkt buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step
3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLinkt” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkT Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button for 20
seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLinkt Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Press and hold the OPEN button rearward to fully open
the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position
between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the
OPEN button rearward will activate the Express Open
Feature, causing the sunroof to open automatically.
To close the panel, the CLOSE end of the switch must be
pressed and held.
Press and hold the VENT button to open the vent. The
sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed
and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position,
press and hold the CLOSE button forward. Releasing the
button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the
sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the
button is pushed forward again.
NOTE:
•
The sunroof will continue to operate for 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned OFF or until the driver’s
door is opened. This feature may be disabled by your
authorized dealer.
•
The Power Accessory Delay feature is programmable
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC). For details, refer to “Per-
sonal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Overhead Console with Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in Section 3.
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again. To
close fully, hold the switch in the forward position until
the glass movement has stopped.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting, or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has three 12 Volt auxiliary power outlets that
can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet adapt-
ers. The outlet located in the lower portion of the
instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can
be covered when not in use. As a safety precaution, the
outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the
ignition switch ON. When the optional Cigar Lighter
heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
There are two additional 12 Volt (20 total Amps for both
outlets) power outlets, one located in the storage bin of
the center console and another located in the right rear
cargo area. These outlets can be configured by the
customer to operate only when the ignition is ON
(switched battery fed) or with the ignition ON or OFF
(battery fed) to allow for cellular telephone charging and
operation while the ignition is OFF.
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus-
tomer has configured the fuse block to switched battery
feed). (See page 186 for more information.)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery
Fed Configuration)
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Configuring Power Outlets
To configure the outlets, be sure the ignition is OFF before
removing the fuse. The “reconfigurable” fuse location is a
special design that allows the fuse to be installed in two
different ways. If the fuse is located in the 9Upper or Top
Position9 the outlets will work at all times. If the fuse is
located in the 9Lower or Bottom Position9 the power
outlets will only work when the ignition is ON.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fuse block is located in the left side kick
panel behind a removable cover near the park brake
pedal. Afuse puller is attached to the inside surface of the
fuse panel cover to aid in removing fuses, if necessary.
Top Fuse Block
1 — 20 Amp Reconfigurable
Fuse
3 — Ign = Bottom Location
2 — Battery = Top Location 4 — Yellow Airbag Fuses
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
115 Volt Inverter Outlet — If Equipped
This vehicle may also be equipped with a 115 Volt (150
Watts Maximum) outlet on the rear of the front center
console.
This outlet can power cell phones, electronics and other
low power devices and is controlled by a switch located
in left lower instrument panel.
To turn on the power inverter press the switch once.
Pressing the switch a second time will turn the power
inverter off.
115 Volt Inverter Outlet
115 Volt Inverter Switch
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
When the inverter switch is pressed, there will be a
delay of approximately one second before the inverter
status indicator turns on. The status Indicator of the
AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
•
Due to built-in overload protection, the inverter will
shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To void serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a Three-Prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
FLOOR CONSOLE
Front Floor Console Features
The floor console between the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat, has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
•
Portable phone storage bin
•
Portable phone cord routing on the sides of the console
lid and the base.
•
12 Volt reconfigurable power outlet inside storage
compartment
•
Side open armrest lid
•
Tissue holder and pen holder
•
Coin slots
•
Removable CD bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
•
115 V Inverter Plug
•
RCA Jacks
The coin slots are located under the instrument panel
center stack.
Cupholders
Your vehicle has eight cupholders. Four are located in the
center console, two are located in the second row armrest
or rear floor console (if equipped), and two are located in
the left-hand quarter panel for third row occupants. The
cupholders and storage bin located in the front of the
center console can be accessed by pressing on the access
doors.
Floor Console
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In colder temperatures you may experience a
slight delay on console doors opening; the console door
speed will come back to normal after 1–2 cycles.
The front storage bin in the center console is equipped
with a removable bin mat. This mat can be removed by
pulling on the tab located on the front edge of the bin
mat. Removing this mat will allow you to retrieve any
lost items that are between the bin doors.
Cupholder Doors
Bin Mat Tab
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
3
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet, portable
phone storage bin and phone cord routing. The phone
storage bin can be used when easy access to the phone is
needed. In addition, the power outlet inside the console
compartment can be used to power up the phone while it
is being stored in the bin.
To use the power outlet, plug in the portable power
recharge cord and place the cord along the opening
under the forward portion of the storage bin. Close the
console armrest lid and plug the power cord into the
phone while resting the phone in the bin. The power
outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard
12 Volt power outlet adapter, requiring up to 20 Amps of
current.
Rear Floor Console Features — If Equipped
The rear floor console us located between the second row
bucket seat and has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments
•
Cupholders
•
Portable phone cord routing on either side, between
the lid and base
•
12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment
•
Tissue holder and pen holder
•
Second row heated seat switches
•
Four slots for DVDs
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To access the storage bin, lift up on the console door latch.
CARGO AREA FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
The cargo management system consists of a removable
cargo liner and removable cargo organizer.
Rear Floor Console
1 — Side Cover Latch
2 — Main Cover Latch
3 — Cargo Divider Handles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
3
To open the side cover, pull on the cover latch, and attach
the cord to the upper cargo net hook.
To open the main cover, pull up on the latch, and attach
the cord to the rear seat head restraint post.
To open the cargo divider, lift up on the cargo divider
handles, raising the doors to the full open position. Raise
the side panels until they engage into the doors.
Side Cover
1 — Cargo Divider Door
2 — Cargo Divider Side Panel
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the cargo management system from the ve-
hicle, pull the right-hand side of the organizer toward
you so that the right pin slides out of the slot in the
vehicle. Push the organizer to the right and lift out of the
vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window controls are located on the climate
control panel.For vehicles equipped with manual climate
controls the controls are located on the upper left corner.
Manual Climate Control Panel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Climate Controls
(ATC) the controls can be found on the lower right corner.
A rotating switch located on the climate control
panel turns the rear wiper ON or OFF. Pressing the
rotating switch inward activates the rear window washer.
Rotating the switch will enable one of five intermittent
delay times for the rear wiper. The delay times range
from 1 second to approximately 20 seconds.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the Park
position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume operation.
Rear Window Defrosting
Apush-button type switch is located in the climate
control panel. Press the switch and the rear win-
dow defroster and electric remote control heated mirrors
(if equipped) will turn on. An amber indicator on the
push-button will light when the defroster is turned on. A
symbol will be displayed when the defroster is turned on
with an ATC control. Push again to turn off prior to
time-out. The defroster will automatically turn off after
15 minutes. For an additional 10 minutes of operation,
Automatic Climate Control Panel
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
push the button a second time. To prevent excessive
battery drain, use the defroster only when the engine is
operating.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe
distance from the window to prevent damaging the
heating elements.
FACTORY INSTALLED ROOF LUGGAGE RACK
A factory installed luggage rack is located on the vehicles
roof.
The load carried on the roof when equipped with a
luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
The side rails between the stantions should be used to tie
down cargo. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
Roof Luggage Rack
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
3
NOTE: Crossbars are offered by Mopart accessories.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls ................ 202
m Instrument Cluster ..................... 203
m Instrument Cluster Description ............ 204
m Setting The Analog Clock ................ 216
m Electronic Digital Clock ................. 216
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ................ 217
m AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio
(RER/REN) – If Equipped ................ 217
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 218
▫
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt) — If Equipped
. . 218
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ................ 218
m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)................ 220
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ....... 220
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play.................. 223
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 226
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 228
4
m Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 229
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ....... 229
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play.................. 235
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 237
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 240
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 240
m Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
— If Equipped......................... 241
▫ Connecting The iPodt ................. 242
▫ Using This Feature ................... 242
▫ Controlling The iPodt Using Radio Buttons . . 243
▫ Play Mode ......................... 243
▫ List Or Browse Mode .................. 244
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only)..... 246
▫ System Activation .................... 246
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 247
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode ................ 248
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 248
▫ Reception Quality .................... 248
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode ..... 248
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped)........................ 251
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)............. 251
m Sirius Backseat TV™— If Equipped ......... 251
m Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV)
— If Equipped......................... 252
m
Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped
. . 252
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 253
▫ CD Player .......................... 253
m CD/DVD Maintenance .................. 253
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 254
m Climate Controls ...................... 255
▫ Manual Control ...................... 255
▫ Air Conditioning Operation ............. 255
▫ Front Blower Control .................. 256
▫ Front Mode Control ................... 256
▫ Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped . . . 259
▫ Rear Window Defrosting And Rear Window
Washer/Wiper....................... 259
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped....................... 260
▫ Automatic Control .................... 260
▫ Level Of Automatic Control ............. 261
▫ Manual Control (ATC) ................. 261
▫ Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped . . . 265
▫ Rear Rotary Temperature Control ......... 266
▫ Front Unit To Rear Unit Chart ........... 267
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 267
▫ Operating Tips Chart .................. 269
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — Radio 13 — Transfer Case Switch*
2 — Air Outlets 8 — Climate Control 14 — Speed Control Switches
3 — Demister Outlets 9 — Rear Washer / Wiper 15 — Hood Release
4 — Instrument Cluster 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Adjustable Pedal Control Switch*
5 — Airbags 11 — Heated Seat Switches* 17 — 115v Inverter Switch
6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Electronic Stability System (ESP) Off
Switch
* If Equipped
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in the tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or
when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when
the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
when the engine is restarted.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM
vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more
than one mile.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads
1/16 of a tank or less.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light comes on for several seconds after the
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the seat belt system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H (Hot), this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H (Hot), the indicator will continu-
ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the speed of the vehicle.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
10. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
11. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) which is described elsewhere in this
manual. This light will come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for approximately three seconds. If this light
remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates that
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not func-
tioning and that service is required. See an authorized
dealer immediately. With the ABS malfunctioning, the
Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) are also switched off. Both malfunction
indicator lights illuminate with the engine running. If the
charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the malfunction
indicator light illuminates and the ABS is switched off.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the voltage is above this value again, the malfunc-
tion indicator light should go out and the ABS is opera-
tional. If the malfunction indicator light stays illumi-
nated, have the system checked at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
13. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine Revolutions-Per-Minute
(RPM x 1000).
14. Shift Lever Indicator
The shift lever indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the position of the auto-
matic transmission shift lever, and the relation of each
position to all other positions. For a good signal the
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
acters PRND21 (no boxes), have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
15. Odometer / Trip Odometer
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
display resets (approximately two seconds).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
Vehicle Warning Messages
For non-Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, when the appropriate conditions ex-
ist, messages such as “door ajar” (indicates that a door(s)
may be ajar), “gASCAP” (which indicates that your gas
cap is possibly loose or damaged), 9CHANgE OIL”
(indicates that the engine oil should be changed), “Lo-
WASH” (low washer fluid), and “noFUSE” (indicates
that the IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power
Module), will display in the odometer.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an EVIC, most
warnings will display in the EVIC. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in Section 3.
The outside temperature will display in the odometer for
non-EVIC equipped vehicles. Pressing the trip odometer
RESET button toggles the feature back to the odometer.
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
16. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
17. Fog Light Indicator
This light shows when the fog lights are ON.
18. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
indicator light in the speedometer area illumi-
nates with the key in the ignition switch turned
to the ON/RUN position and it should go out
with the engine running. The ESP is also combined with
the Traction Control System (TCS), when the 9ESP/TCS”
Indicator Light9 starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESP system becomes active. The 9ESP/
TCS Indicator Light9 also flashes when TCS is active. If
the 9ESP/TCS Indicator Light9 begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the ESP-Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available
caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal
model.
19. Transmission Temperature Indicator
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL until the light goes off.
20. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be
drivable, however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned on
and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
21. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
22. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Warning Lamp
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow ESP/BAS
warning lamp is in the instrument cluster it
comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, it should go out with the engine running. If the
ESP/BAS warning lamp comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either
the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The ESP control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is actively operating.
23. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system which monitors
the emissions and engine control system. If the
vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the MIL will come
on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as
a bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is
not ready for emissions testing, the MIL will come on
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15
seconds, then blink for 10 seconds, and remain on until
the vehicle is started. If the MIL does not come on during
starting, see an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the MIL comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service. See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required. See an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
25. Airbag Indicator
The airbag indicator light illuminates and re-
mains lit for six to eight seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on when the ignition is first turned on, or
the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the
airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.
26. 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator light illuminates when the transfer
case is in 4WD position.
27. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD light will illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the ON position and will stay on for two
seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,
it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required.
28. Cruise Light (Speed Control)
The cruise light indicator illuminates when the electronic
speed control system is turned on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
29. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the shift
lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/HAUL
button has been selected.
30. 4LOW Indicator
Indicates the transfer case is in 4LOW position.
31. Odometer / Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model), whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
Analog Clock
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, timekeeping is
accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio, the time button
alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio, only one
of the two, time or frequency, is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
trol knob.
3. After the hours are adjusted, push the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait approximately
five seconds.
AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO
(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
CD/DVD player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD), and a “JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius
Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch
screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS) based Navigation system.
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
(RER) user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectT) — If Equipped
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day on
the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)t (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)t
Guide.”
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
RES/RSC Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)t (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)t
Guide.”
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with UConnectt. For sales code
RER, REN and REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer
to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s Manual. UCI is
available only if equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows you to plug an iPodt into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPodt and
iPhonet devices. Some iPodt software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPodt to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPodt,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
•
Connecting an iPodt to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPodT
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPodt to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPodt is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPodt may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPodt starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
•
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
ing the cable.
•
If the iPodt battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPodt connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the optional connection cable to connect an
iPodt to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPodt audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPodt can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPodt contents.
•
The iPodt battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPodT Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPodt) mode and access a connected
iPodt, press the ‘AUX’ button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPodt) mode, iPodt audio tracks (if available
from iPodt) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPodt automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPodt and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this
button at any other time in the track it will jump to the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPodt
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPodt scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPodt.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPodt.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPodt.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
•
During all List modes, the iPodt displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPodt.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 - Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPodt. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPodt then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPodt sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPodt.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPodt (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPodt, or connections to the
iPodt in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPodt while driving.
Failure to following this warning could result in an
accident.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VEST) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™ — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video coast to coast. The
subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
SIRIUS Backseat TV™ offers three video channels for
family entertainment, directly from its satellites and
broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)t, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
tailed operating instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ con-
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head-
sets. The system is located in the headliner behind the
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD in good condition, take the follow-
ing precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Control
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. The
following describes its operation:
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn the air conditioning ON or OFF, perform
the following steps:
•
Position the mode control button to the desired airflow
setting.
•
Set the front blower control to any desired speed.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button which is located to
the right of the temperature control slide. An indicator
light on the Snowflake (A/C) button shows that the air
conditioning is ON.
•
Press the Snowflake (A/C) button a second time to
turn the air conditioning OFF.
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
Manual Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Front Blower Control
The front blower controls the
amount of air delivered to the
passenger compartment.
There are four blower speeds.
The fan speed increases as
you turn the control clock-
wise. When the front blower
control is turned to OFF, the
blower will be turned off and
the system will be positioned
in recirculation mode.
Front Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Mode (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select either the Panel or Bi-Level
mode positions when the outside air
contains smoke, odors, high humidity,
or if rapid cooling of the interior is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only, when ei-
ther of these positions are selected. Air
flows through the panel outlets or panel and floor outlets
in these modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat (Floor)
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel. A small
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlet.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlet located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
Temperature Control
The temperature of the air is controlled by a slide located
on the top center of the control panel. Move the slide left
or right to change the temperature. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
Manual Temperature Control
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Temperature Control — If Equipped
Rotating this knob left to the
REAR CONTROL position al-
lows the passengers in the
second and third row seats to
control the blower speed and
temperature by means of the
rear control located in the rear
of the center floor console as
described under “Rear Zone
Control.” Rotating this knob
to the OFF position turns off the rear climate controls.
Rotating this knob to the right of the OFF position allows
the driver and front passenger to control the rear blower
speed, and the rear temperature using the front tempera-
ture slide. The mode, front or rear, is always controlled by
the front mode control. For example: Panel mode on the
front control will give you air from the outlets in the
headliner in the rear. Floor mode in the front will give
you air from the floor outlets in the rear.
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
See the “Rear Window Features” section of this book.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The control can be turned on by pressing the Power knob.
When the control is turned on, it will be in the last mode
prior to being turned off. Pressing the Power knob again
will turn off the control. The control can also be turned on
by pressing any button and it will display the corre-
sponding operation mode for that button.
Automatic Control
The ATC system can maintain a steady comfort level in
various weather conditions with a simple operation:
•
Select your desired temperature setting by pressing
the + or - side of the Temp rocker switches. A digital
temperature setting for driver and passenger will be
displayed. The ATC system uses an infrared sensor
located in the overhead console to measure the tem-
perature of the driver and passengers. Based on the
sensor input, the system will automatically control
comfort by varying the temperature, fan speed, and
mode. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even
under changing conditions. It is important that objects
are not blocking the infrared sensor. It is also impor-
tant that objects are not used that may scratch or
damage it in any way.
Automatic Temperature Control
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Level Of Automatic Control
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. It is
not necessary to move the temperature setting for cold or
hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the tem-
perature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as
quickly as possible.
NOTE: In cold weather, the fan will not turn on in Auto
mode until the engine coolant has warmed up suffi-
ciently. This is indicated by the “WARM UP DELAY”
message on the display.
NOTE: The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric by selecting the U.S./METRIC Customer-
Programmable feature. Refer to 9Overhead Console
Customer-Programmable Features9 in Section 3. The
mode will also be shown in the display and will change
as required during automatic operation.
NOTE: The system can be put into recirculate mode
without affecting ATC operation. This will prevent out-
side air from entering the vehicle. Use this mode to
temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust.
Manual Control (ATC)
You may also choose to customize your comfort by
selecting the fan speed and mode manually. Turning the
fan speed knob or any mode button places the system
into manual operation.
While in manual operation there are six fan speeds
available and the choice of any mode. The airflow
temperature is adjusted automatically to maintain the
desired comfort level. You can adjust the temperature by
pressing the + or - Temp rocker switches.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
FAN Control
Use this knob to regulate the amount of air delivered
through the system in any mode you select. Rotation
of the knob to increase (clockwise) or decrease (counter-
clockwise) fan speed.
Air Conditioning Operation
Press this button to enable the air conditioning
system. Compressor operation is automatic when
you press the AUTO button and no snowflake is
shown. A snowflake indicates that the A/C system is
enabled. The snowflake will not be displayed in AUTO
mode even though the A/C system is enabled.
The compressor may operate at any temperature above
32°F (0°C).
NOTE: The compressor will not engage until the engine
has been running for several seconds. Slight changes in
engine speed or power may be noticed when the com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal occurrence since the
compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and
improve fuel economy.
Recirculate Button
Press this button to recirculate the air inside the
vehicle. Outside air is prevented from entering
the vehicle. Use this mode to temporarily block
out any outside odors, smoke, dust or when
rapid cooling of the interior is required.
Manual control of recirculation is possible only in Panel,
Floor, and Bi-Level modes. It will not operate in Mix, or
Defrost modes. The recirculation symbol will flash three
times indicating recirculation is not available in these
modes.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the Recirculate button to return to outside air. Some
conditions will cause captured interior air to fog win-
dows when in recirculate mode.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
the airflow.
Floor (Heat)
Air flows primarily through the floor outlets lo-
cated under the instrument panel. A small amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Defrost
Outside air is directed to the windshield through
the defroster outlet located at the base of the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C snowflake button has not been pressed. This
dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
4
Rear Temperature Control (ATC)
The REAR button cycles through the following modes:
Rear Control From Front
This allows the driver or passenger to control the rear
blower speeds rotating the Power/Fan knob and the rear
temperature using the PASS/REAR Temp +/- rocker
switch. While in this mode, pressing the POWER/FAN
knob will turn the rear system off. Pressing the Power/
Fan knob will turn the rear system back on.
NOTE: The display will show a 9REAR9 fan speed graph
and a 9REAR9 digital temp setting.
CONTROL IN REAR
This allows the passengers in the second row seats to
control the blower speed and temperature by means of the
rear control located in the rear of the center floor console as
described under the 9Rear Zone Climate Control.9
NOTE: The front display will show “CONTROL IN
REAR.”
REAR OFF
This turns the rear system off. The control will return to
the front system display after approximately five seconds
if no buttons are pushed while in one of the rear system
displays. You may also return to the front system display
sooner by pushing any button except the Power/Fan
knob, the REAR button, or the driver/passenger Temp
rocker buttons.
NOTE: The display will show “REAR OFF.”
REAR AUTO
This mode places the rear system in automatic tempera-
ture control. Rear temperature can be set as desired (72°F
[22°C] recommended for average person) and will be
displayed digitally on the front control when in rear
mode.
Rear Window Defrosting and Rear Window
Washer/Wiper
Refer to “Rear Window Features” in Section 4.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Zone Climate Control — If Equipped
Headliner air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vane knobs on the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
The rear compartment control uses two rotary knobs: one
for the temperature control and the other for the fan
speed control. The mode for the rear air conditioning and
heating system is always controlled by the front control
unit. Fan and temperature can be controlled from the
front control unit or the rear control unit.
Rear Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
4
Rear Rotary Blower Control
The second row seat occupants have control of the rear
blower speed only when the front control unit is in the
“REAR CONTROL” position or “CONTROL IN REAR
for ATC.9
The rear blower switch has an OFF position and a range
of blower speeds. Rotating the rear blower control clock-
wise will increase the blower speed.
Rear Rotary Temperature Control
The second row seat occupants have control of the rear
temperature only when the front control unit is in the
9REAR CONTROL9 position.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob to the right or left.
The blue area indicates cooler temperatures while the red
area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: For best operation, make sure that ventilation
grilles located in the rear storage area are not obstructed
by stowed articles.
Rear Storage Ventilation Grilles
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Unit to Rear Unit Chart
If the Front Control is
selected
Rear Airflow will come
from
Panel Headliner
Bi-Level Headliner
Floor Floor
Mix Floor
Defrost Floor
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, set the blower fan to the highest
setting, set the mode control to the panel fresh position,
press the Snowflake button to turn on the air condition-
ing, and drive with the windows open for the first few
minutes. Once the hot air has been expelled, close the
windows and set the mode selector to the Recirculation
panel or Recirculation Bi-level position. When a comfort-
able condition has been reached, choose a mode position
and adjust the temperature control and blower speed as
necessary to maintain comfort. For high humidity condi-
tions, it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation
mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning on the air conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using Mix Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Interior fogging
on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting
the defrost mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminants (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminants increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions. This will also prevent snow ingestion into the
ducts.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures .................... 275
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 275
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below 220°F
Or 229°C).......................... 276
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................. 276
▫ After Starting ....................... 277
m Engine Block Heater – If Equipped ......... 278
m Automatic Transmission ................. 278
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 279
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 279
m Four-Wheel Drive Operation .............. 284
▫ NV 140 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped ..... 284
▫
NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped
...... 285
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case ....................... 288
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 290
m Driving Through Water .................. 290
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 291
5
▫ Shallow Standing Water ................ 291
m Power Steering ........................ 293
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 294
m Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
— 5.7L Engine Only..................... 294
m Parking Brake ........................ 294
m Anti-Lock Brake System ................. 296
m Electronic Brake Control System ........... 299
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 299
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 300
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 300
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .......... 302
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ......... 303
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............. 306
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light ...................... 306
m Tire Safety Information .................. 307
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 307
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN).......... 311
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ........... 312
m Tires — General Information .............. 316
▫ Tire Pressure ........................ 316
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................. 317
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .... 319
▫ Radial Ply Tires ...................... 319
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ........ 319
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped ......... 320
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 321
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 321
▫ Life Of Tire ......................... 322
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 323
▫ Alignment And Balance ................ 324
m Supplemental Tire Pressure Information
— If Equipped......................... 325
m Tire Chains .......................... 325
m Snow Tires .......................... 326
m Tire Rotation Recommendations ............ 327
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 328
▫ Base System – If Equipped .............. 330
▫ Premium System – If Equipped........... 332
▫ General Information................... 335
m Fuel Requirements ..................... 335
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................. 336
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 336
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 337
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 338
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 338
▫ Fuel System Cautions.................. 338
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings............. 340
m Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only)
— If Equipped......................... 340
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 340
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 342
▫ Fuel Requirements .................... 342
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 343
▫ Starting ........................... 343
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 343
▫ Replacement Parts .................... 343
m Adding Fuel ......................... 344
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............... 344
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Message.... 345
m Vehicle Loading ....................... 346
▫ Certification Label .................... 346
▫ Curb Weight ........................ 348
▫ Loading ........................... 348
m Trailer Towing ........................ 349
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 349
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 353
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ...................... 354
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 354
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 355
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 360
m Snowplow ........................... 362
m
Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
. . 362
▫ 2WD Models ........................ 362
▫ 4WD Models ........................ 362
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents
can also be caused by pressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the ex-
haust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle
fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
Normal Starting
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below 220°F or 229°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for proper jump starting procedures
and follow them carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled on fuel injected
engines and will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER – IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to
have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.
The engine block heater cord is located:
•
4.7L Engine — at the front of the engine compartment
near the radiator cap.
•
5.7L Engine — on the left side of the engine compart-
ment and rearward of the power distribution center.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission
gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
PARK
This gear supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Shift to NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
DRIVE
For most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use
it also when climbing long grades, and for engine brak-
ing when descending moderately steep grades. To pre-
vent excessive engine speed, do not exceed 45 mph (72
km/h) in this range.
1 (First)
For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at
low speeds (25 mph {40 km/h} or less) when going
downhill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission contains an electronically
controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed (OVER-
DRIVE). The transmission will automatically shift from
DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission selector is in DRIVE;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating
temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into OVER-
DRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation
will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “Transmission
Temperature Indicator Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may downshift out of OVERDRIVE until
the transmission cools down. After cooldown, the trans-
mission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from OVERDRIVE to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at
vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is
disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified.
Shifts into OVERDRIVE (4th gear) are allowed during
steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and automatic
closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for improved
braking) will occur during steady braking.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at
light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling
or response during normal operation in high gear. When
the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or
during acceleration, the clutch automatically and
smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in
OVERDRIVE and in DRIVE.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1-3 miles [1.6 - 4.8 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the TOW/HAUL button, when the transmission
TOW/HAUL Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmis-
sion is able to shift into, and out of, Overdrive. For
vehicles with 4.7L or 5.7L engines (which have two
Overdrive gears), the transmission may not shift into 5th
gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
warm.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into
any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
NV 140 Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped
The NV 140 is a single speed (HI range only) transfer case
which provides convenient full-time four-wheel drive.
No driver interaction is required.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions – If Equipped
The NV 244 Generation II is an electric-shift transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is
located on the instrument panel.
The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides four
mode positions - Normal four-wheel drive (4WD) high
range, four-wheel drive lock (4WD LOCK) range, four-
wheel drive low (4WD LOW) range, and NEUTRAL.
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal
all-wheel drive position (4WD) at all times on any given
road surface, including dry, hard-surfaced roads. The
4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry, hard-surfaced
roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and
convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times
regardless of road conditions.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front
and rear driveshafts together, through the transfer case
inter-axle differential, and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions. The
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry, hard-surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be
used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in this section for specific procedures on shifting
into and out of NEUTRAL.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
flashing, the transfer case position is four-wheel drive
(4WD) and indicates the current and desired transfer case
selection (4WD ⇔ 4WD LOCK).
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the (SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation
II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and
therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move,
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor-
mation:
4WD
This range allows front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds on all road surfaces.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
4WD LOCK
This range locks the transfer case inter-axle differential,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road sur-
faces only.
4WD LOW
This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It locks
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
section.
Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
4WD/4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
traction). In this situation, a position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
on. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position
may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire
pressure, or excessive loading.
NOTE: When shifting into, or out of 4WD LOW, some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Shifting Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Shifting Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five seconds, and retry the shift.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
CAUTION!
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. For correct fluid type, refer to ”Power Steering
Reservoir” under “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section.
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) — 5.7L
ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in PARK position. When parking on a
hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK; otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or the vehicle may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
(Continued)
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph
(20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake
while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal
movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice
and snow. This is normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is subject to
possible detrimental effects of electronic interference
caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or
telephones.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
•
Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
•
When descending mountains or hills, repeated brak-
ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos-
sible.
•
Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuver-
ing, parking, or stopping.
•
Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.
•
After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC). All six systems work together to enhance vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions, and
are commonly referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
WARNING!
•
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this Section. This brake pressure modula-
tion transfers drive torque from slipping to non-slipping
wheels to provide optimal forward traction.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
ESP OFF Switch Location
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking dis-
tances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply con-
tinuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence.
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
•
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the TCS or
ESP system becomes active. It will also flash
once a swaying trailer is detected and the
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) system activates. If the ESP/
TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
WARNING! (Continued)
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ESP system has two available operating modes.
4WD/4WD LOCK or 2WD Models
ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOCK
and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW
or NEUTRALback to 4WD LOCK, the ESP system will be
in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
driving situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial
Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
This mode is entered by momentarily
depressing the ESP OFF Control
Switch. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine management portion of
ESP has been desensitized, the thresh-
olds for ESP activation are raised, and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be
illuminated. This mode is intended to
be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) is not available when the system is in the
9Partial Off9 mode. To turn ESP on again, momentarily
depress the ESP OFF Control Switch. This will restore the
normal ON mode of operation. ESP always operates
under braking, even with the switch in the OFF position.
Partial Off
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the “Partial Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are desensitized. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP Control Switch. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP on by momentarily depress-
ing the ESP Control Switch. This may be done with the
vehicle in motion.
4WD LOW Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK or
NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW, the ESP system will be in this
mode. In 4WD LOW, ESP function is desensitized until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h). At 30
mph (48 km/h) the normal ESP stability function returns
and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light turns off. When the
vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h) the ESP
system goes back to Partial Off. ESP is desensitized at low
vehicle speeds in 4WD LOW so that it will not interfere
with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
The ABS is in a special Off Road mode that allows wheels
to lock at lower speeds if gravel is detected to shorten
stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
NOTE: When the vehicle is in 4WD LOW, a feature of
the ESP system remains active whether the ESP is on or
off. This feature functions similar to a limited slip differ-
ential and controls the wheel spin across an axle. If one
wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning.
WARNING!
In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to
stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and
apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of
the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Al-
ways use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. For additional infor-
mation on towing a trailer with your vehicle, refer to
9Trailer Towing9 in Section 5.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow ESP/BAS Warning Light
and the yellow ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the instru-
ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. They should both go out with
the engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or
both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Warning
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— 9R9 means radial construction
—9D9 means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295
kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. DO NOT make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, DO NOT drive more than 50
mph (80 km/h).
•
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
•
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, DO NOT
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, DO NOT drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, DO
NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48
km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously with-
out stopping when you are stuck.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. DO NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
1—WornTire
2 — New Tire
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
DO NOT use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
WARNING!
•
NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
— IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains on your vehicle, or other traction
aids that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
truck.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R17 tires.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 trucks equipped with
tires other than P245/70R17 tires. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do not use
tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of your vehicle.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo-
cated on the driver’s side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold
for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS warning light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning
light p will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS light
will still be ON. In this situation, the TPMS light will turn
off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not
use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the
sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the tire pressure monitoring sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Lamp.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur by any
of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due to electronic
devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors; 2) Installing some form of
aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave sig-
nals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings; 4) Using tire chains on the vehicle; 5) Using
wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Lamp will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Lamp
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Lamp will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
•
Three trigger modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells).
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and a
graphic displaying tire pressures.
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
flashing.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM” message for three seconds. This text message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- - -“ in place of
the pressure value(s) indicating which tire pressure
monitoring sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due
to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting
the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors;. 2)
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
affects radio wave signals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings; 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle; 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for three seconds and then display dashes (- - -) in
place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The EVIC will
display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for three
seconds, and then display dashes (- - -) in place of a
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- - -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circum-
stances may result in poorer performance.
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
(Continued)
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully
loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock per-
sists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
yellow fuel filler cap (gas cap) that shows E85 / Gasoline.
This section only covers those subjects that are unique to
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this
manual for information on features that are common
between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered ve-
hicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap)
can operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPARt engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler LLC engines. Use MOPARt or an equivalent oil
meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/Liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol, com-
patible parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: To avoid contact between fuel cap and paint,
hang tether strap over hook provided on inner fuel door.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light to turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas
cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
RESET button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
Certification Label
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its 9loaded and
ready for operation9 condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver.)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
may reduce handling, stability, and braking perfor-
mance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
5
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of Weight-
Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
5
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com/towing
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada)
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire and Loading Information Placard”
under “Tire Safety Information” in Section 5.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
5
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
9chock9 the trailer wheels.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
tire inflation procedures, refer to “Tire Pressures”
under ”Tires–General Information” in Section 5.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. For the proper inspection
procedure, refer to “Tread Wear Indicators” under
”Tires–General Information” in Section 5.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Replacement Tires”
under “Tires–General Information” in Section 5. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations:
4-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
5
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. For transmission
fluid change intervals, refer to “Maintenance Schedule”
in Section 8.
7-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the TOW/HAUL feature ON when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2
on more severe grades.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can resume cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to “Cooling System Operating” under “Mainte-
nance Procedures” in Section 7.
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
5
SNOWPLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
2WD Models
Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the
driveshaft for towing is not recommended since this
allows transmission fluid to leak out.
4WD Models
CAUTION!
Vehicles equipped with an NV 140 Transfer Case
(which has no NEUTRAL position) may NOT be
used for recreational towing.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be
shifted into NEUTRALfor recreational towing. The NEU-
TRAL selection button is located on the lower left-hand
corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for
four seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Turn ignition key to the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button,
and must continue to be met until the four seconds
elapses and the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements (with the exception of Step 3
- Key ON) are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL
button or are no longer met during the four second timer,
then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the NEU-
TRAL button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without
starting the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for
one second.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Start the engine.
11. Shift the transmission into DRIVE.
NOTE: Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button,
and must continue to be met until one second elapses and
the shift has been completed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5
If any of these requirements are not met prior to depress-
ing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the
one second time, then all of the position indicator lights
will flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 368
m Jacking Instructions .................... 369
▫ Jack Location ....................... 369
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ............... 370
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ............... 371
m Jump–Starting Procedures ................ 377
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 379
m Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ....... 380
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 381
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 381
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 381
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the top
of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel.
To operate the hazard warning flashers press the switch
and all front and rear directional signals will flash
intermittently. Press the switch a second time to turn off
the hazard warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
hazard warning flasher system will continue to operate
with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the hazard warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor jack and tire changing tools are stowed under
the second row seat.
The jack is secured in place with a winged stud and a
fixed stud. It is very important to secure the jack tightly
in place by engaging the slot in the base to the fixed stud
under the middle seat. The winged stud inserts through
the eyelet in the end of the jack’s worm screw.
Jack Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
6
Removing The Spare Tire
The spare tire on your vehicle is located underneath the
vehicle in the rear.
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the
vehicle.
1. Remove the rubber plug from the floor in the cargo
area.
2. Engage the jack wrench extension to the spare tire
winch through the hole in the floor.
Spare Tire Location
Spare Tire Winch
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
tire. Continue to turn the wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.
It is recommended that you stow the flat tire or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can dam-
age the winch.
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371
6
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the shift
lever in PARK (automatic transmission). On 4-wheel
drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
•
Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jack-
ing position. For example, if the
right front wheel is being changed,
block the left rear wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
Jack Warning Label
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
6
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame
(prior to inboard transition). Operate the jack using the
jack drive tube and the wheel wrench; the tube extension
may be used but is not required.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Front Jacking Location
Left Rear Jacking Location
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
4. Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench clock-
wise, until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ± 10 ft lbs
(183 ± 14 N·m) dynamic torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Right Rear Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375
6
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or alu-
minum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may
result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
•
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
(Continued)
376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is downward. Slide
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
two times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
JUMP–STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12 volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator, DO NOT
jump-start the battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377
6
If the indicator is dark or shows a green dot, proceed as
follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn OFF the heater, radio and all unnecessary elec-
trical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
(Continued)
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting a jump-start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
•
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while apply-
ing slight pressure to the accelerator.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
6
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles
under tow, must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
OFF position, along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/h), and the distance must not exceed 15
miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph (50 km/h), it must be towed on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km), can cause severe transmission damage.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment – 4.7L .............. 385
m Engine Compartment – 5.7L .............. 386
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ....... 387
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 387
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 388
m Replacement Parts ..................... 389
m Dealer Service ........................ 390
m Maintenance Procedures ................. 390
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 390
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 392
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 393
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ............... 393
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 394
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints ....... 395
▫ Body Lubrication ..................... 396
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 396
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers ..... 397
7
▫ Exhaust System ...................... 397
▫ Cooling System ...................... 400
▫ Brake System ....................... 405
▫ Automatic Transmission ................ 406
▫ Transfer Case ....................... 408
▫ Axles ............................. 409
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 410
m Fuses .............................. 415
▫ Interior Fuses ....................... 415
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) ............. 417
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Integrated Power Module) .............. 420
m Vehicle Storage ....................... 423
m Replacement Light Bulbs ................. 423
m Bulb Replacement ..................... 424
▫ Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal .......... 424
▫ Tail Lights, Turn Signals And Backup Lights
— Replacement ...................... 425
▫ License Lights ....................... 427
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight .......... 428
▫ Fog Lights ......................... 429
m Fluids And Capacities ................... 431
m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 432
▫ Engine ............................ 432
▫ Chassis ............................ 433
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 4.7L
1 — Battery 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Integrated Power Module
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Power Distribution Center 12 — Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L
1 — Battery 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Integrated Power Module
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Power Distribution Center 12 — Air Cleaner Filter
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the
gas cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer RESET button to turn the message off. If the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPARt parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPARt parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart/liter of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
the top of the SAFE zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
recommended engine oil change intervals.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi Displacement System” under “Starting
and Operating” in Section 5.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPARt engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for
recommended engine air cleaner filter change intervals.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All 4-wheel drive models are equipped with four con-
stant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is
not required. However, the joint boot should be inspected
for external leakage or damage periodically. If external
leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately. Continued operation
could result in failure of the joint due to water and dirt
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
contamination of the grease. This would require com-
plete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate, and hood hinges should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPARt
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment: be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon/liter of
fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
7
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser and
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Refer to
Section 8 of this manual.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant; for
correct coolant type, refer to “Engine Coolant” under
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this section.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
7
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When
adding coolant:
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPARt
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
7
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled/deionized water for
proper corrosion protection of your engine, which
contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
For correct fluid type, refer to ”Brake Master Cylinder”
under “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this
section.
WARNING!
•
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifica-
tions may result in sudden brake failure during
hard prolonged braking. You could have an acci-
dent.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching on fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
7
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
NOTE: If equipped with a dipstick, use the following
procedure. If your vehicle has a capped dipstick, it is
sealed and should not be tampered with.Your authorized
dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level
is set properly.
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid; for correct fluid type, refer to “Automatic
Transmission” under “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in this section. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. For correct
fluid type, refer to “Automatic Transmission” under
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this
section.
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
Drain And Refill
Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recom-
mended transfer case fluid change intervals.
Lubricant Selection
For correct fluid type, refer to ”Transfer Case” under
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this section.
Axles
For correct fluid type, refer to ”Front or Rear Axle” under
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this section.
Drain And Refill
Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recom-
mended axle fluid change intervals.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Rear Axle
Rear Axle fluid levels should be 7/8 in (22 mm) +/- 1/4
in (6 mm) below the fill hole for 8 1/4 in (21 cm) and 9
1/4 (23 cm) in axles should be 1 5/8 in (31 mm) +/- 1/4
in (6 mm)
Front Axle
Front axle fluid level should be 3/4 in (20 mm) +/- 1/4 in
(6 mm) below the level of the fill hole.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
Appearance Care and Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPARt Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPARt Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use MOPARt Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and liftgate be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPARt Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPARt Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPARt cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPARt Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPARt Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on YES Essen-
tialst products.
Interior Care
Use MOPARt Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPARt Total Clean, then
MOPARt Spot & Stain Remover, if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPARt
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
MOPARt Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPARt Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1.
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Interior Fuses
The fuse block contains blade-type mini-fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers for high-current circuits. It is located
in the left kick panel. It is accessible through a snap-in
cover.
Fuse Block Cover
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
Cavity Mini Fuse/Color Description
F1 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Cluster
Battery Feed
F 2 10 Amp Red Spare
F3 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/Start for
Next Generation Control-
ler (NGC), Integrated
Power Module (IPM),
A/C Relay and Fuel
Pump Relay
F4 10 Amp Red
Door Node and Non-
Memory Power Mirror
Switch Battery Feed
F5 (2) 10 Amp Red
Airbags (two Fuses in
Yellow Holder)
F6 2 Amp Clear
Ignition Run/Start
Unlock
F7 25 Amp Natural Radio Battery Feed
F8 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run/Start for
Cluster/Transfer Case/
Seat Sw. Back Lighting
F9 10 Amp Red
Satellite Digital Audio
Receiver (SDAR)/Digital
Video Disc (DVD)
Battery Feed
F10 10 Amp Red Spare
F11 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F12 20 Amp Yellow Cluster Battery Feed
F13 10 Amp Red
Ignition Run HVAC
Module/Heated Rear
Glass (EBL) Relay
F14 10 Amp Red
ABS Module Ignition
Run
F15 15 Amp Blue
Battery Feed Bluetootht,
Compass/Trip Computer
(CMTC), Sentry Keyt
Diagnostics
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
F16 20 Amp Yellow
Reconfigurable Power
Outlets
F17 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Run / Rear Park
Assist / Second Row
Heated Seats
F18 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Ignition
F19 10 Amp Red Spare Fuse
F20 15 Amp Blue
Heating & Air Condition-
ing w/ATC Only Battery
Feed
F21 25 Amp Natural Amplifier Battery Feed
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located in the left side of the engine
compartment.
1 — Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity num-
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and
relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
1 30 Amp
Pink
Starter
2 30 Amp
Pink
Front Wiper
3 40 Amp
Green
Brake Batt
4 30 Amp
Pink
JB Feed Acc # 2
5 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
6 30 Amp
Pink
Run Remote Relay
Feed
7 40 Amp
Green
Blower Motor Relay
Feed
8 40 Amp
Green
JB Feed Acc Delay
9 Spare
10 30 Amp
Pink
ASD
11 40 Amp
Green
Power Liftgate ( If
Equipped)
12 40 Amp
Green
JB Feed / Heated Rear
Glass (EBL)/T-Case
Brake
13 30 Amp
Pink
JB Feed RR
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
14 40 Amp
Green
ESP Pump
15 50 Amp
Red
JB Feed
16 10 Amp
Red
Spare
17 Spare
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
19 20 Amp
Yellow
Next Generation Con-
troller (NGC)
20 25 Amp
Clear
115V Power Inverter
21 20 Amp
Yellow
ABS Batt
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
22 20 Amp
Yellow
Next Generation Con-
troller (NGC) Batt
23 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
24 15 Amp
Blue
A/C Clutch
25 15 Amp
Blue
Stop Lamp Switch
26 Spare
27 20 Amp
Yellow
Run/Start Relay Feed
28 Spare
29 Relay Run Start
30 Relay Run Remote
31 Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
7
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
32 Relay Starter
33 Relay Electronic Automatic
Transaxle (EATX)
34 Relay AC Clutch
35 Relay Fuel Pump Rly
36 Spare
37 Relay Stop Lamp Switch
38 Spare
39 Relay Blower Motor
40 Relay Auto Shut Down
(ASD) Rly
Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)
1 — Integrated Power Module
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
An integrated power module is located in the left side of
the engine compartment. This center contains cartridge
fuses, mini fuses and relays. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
1 Relay Wiper On/Off Rly
2 Relay Wiper Hi/Lo Rly
3 Relay Horn Rly
4 Relay Rear Wiper Rly
5 Relay Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn Rly
6 Relay Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn Rly
7 Relay Park Lamps Rly
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
8 10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
9 10 Amp
Red
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
10 10 Amp
Red
Rt Park Lamps
11 Relay Radiator Fan Hi Rly
12 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #4
13 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #2
14 20 Amp
Yellow
Adjustable Pedal
15 20 Amp
Yellow
Ft Fog Lamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
7
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
16 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
17 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Wiper
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #1
19 20 Amp
Yellow
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
20 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #3
21 20 Amp
Yellow
Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
22 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module
(FCM) BATT # 5
23 40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan
Cav-
ity
Cartridge
Fuse /
Relay
Mini Fuse Description
24 Relay Radiator Fan Lo Rly
25 Relay Ft Fog Lamps Rly
26 Relay Adjustable Pedal Rly
27 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1
28 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
29 Spare
30 Spare
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw (I.O.D.) fuses located
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The I.O.D.
cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse
to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse
block.
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light ....................NotServiceable
Liftgate Lamp ...........................567
Overhead Console Lights...........NotServiceable
Reading Light...................NotServiceable
Visor Vanity Lights ...............NotServiceable
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Headlight .............................H13
Front Park/Turn ......................3457AK
Backup ...............................3057
Center High-Mounted Stop Light .............921
Front Side Marker ........................168
Fog Lamp .............................9145
License Plate Light .......................168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal and Side Marker ....3057
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights/Parking/Turn Signal
1. Remove the two bolts attaching the headlight to the
upper fender reinforcement (hood must be opened to
access bolts).
2. Remove one nut that attaches the headlight to the
inner fender panel. Access to the nut is possible by
opening the fender panel access door which is located in
the wheel liner.
3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the
headlight from the fender panel.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. While firmly holding the headlight in your hands
disconnect all connectors by following the procedure
described in step number 5 below.
5. Remove the bulb connector from the headlight making
sure to pull and release the red tab on all connectors.
Loosen the connector by pressing down on the black
and/or green release which is located below or above the
red tab. The green release is located above the red tab on
the H13, the black release is located above the 3457AK
red tab.
6. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
7. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
NOTE: These are Halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat build-up which reduces bulb
life.
Tail Lights, Turn Signals And Backup Lights —
Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
7
2. Rotate the light to the outboard side of the vehicle and
remove.
3. Unlock and remove electrical connector.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Twist bulb sockets counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
5. Remove the bulbs from the bulb sockets by pulling the
bulb straight out.
License Lights
1. Push tab towards the light and remove light assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
7
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb from socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
1. Remove two screws securing stoplight housing assem-
bly to the liftgate.
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn socket 1/4 counterclockwise and free from hous-
ing.
3. Pull bulb straight from socket to remove.
Fog Lights
To replace the left foglamp bulb:
1. Remove the three wheel liner screws
1 - Wheel Liner Screws
2 - Far Left Air Dam Screw
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
7
2. Remove the far left air dam screw at the bottom of the
fascia.
3. Peel back the liner and access the fog light.
4. Rotate the socket and connector 1/4 turn counter-
clockwise and pull straight reward to disengage from the
light.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace.
The right fog light can be accessed from below the
vehicle. Follow the previous Steps 4 and 5 of the left fog
light to replace the bulb.
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat build-up, which reduces bulb
life.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 27 Gallons 102 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System (Includes 2.1 Quarts/2 Liters for Cool-
ant Bottle)
4.7L Engine (MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
14.2 Quarts 13.5 Liters
5.7L Engine (MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
16.6 Quarts 15.8 Liters
NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil (4.7L/5.7L Engines) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the
Multi-Displacement System (MDS).
Engine Oil Filter MOPARt Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [.99 mm]) Lower Bank — FR8T1332
(Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) REC14MCC4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Fuel Selection (4.7L Engine) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPARt ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case MOPARt ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPARt DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPARt ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
7
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED – If Equipped” under “System Status (EVIC
Displays)” in Section 3, or under “Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” under “Instrument Cluster Description” in Section
4.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with 16 spark plugs; one set is located on the
top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be changed every 30,000 miles (50 000
km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or
24 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs on
4.7L engines. **
❏ Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L
engines.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or
48 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines. **
❏ Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L engines.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000
km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. †
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines. **
❏ Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L engines.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid; change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
96 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the ignition cables on 4.7L
engines.
❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs on
4.7L engines. **
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid;
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines. **
❏ Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L engines.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 451
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............ 451
▫ Prepare A List ....................... 451
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 451
m If You Need Assistance .................. 451
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center ........... 452
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 452
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 452
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 453
▫ Service Contract ..................... 453
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 454
m MOPARt Parts ....................... 454
m Reporting Safety Defects ................. 454
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 454
▫ In Canada .......................... 455
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and
high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized deal-
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451
9
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus-
tomer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their sincere
efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453
9
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455
9
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457
9
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............206,296
Adding Fuel ...........................344
Adjustable Pedals .......................153
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 393
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............255,394
Air Conditioning ........................255
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............267
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ................259
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............394,395
Air Conditioning System ................255,394
Air Filter ........................385,386,393
Air Pressure, Tires ....................317,325
Airbag .............................54,215
Airbag Light ..........................62,76
Alarm, Panic ............................24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................19,206
Alignment and Balance ...................324
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............8
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................248
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............401,431
Disposal ............................403
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............296,299
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................206
Anti-Theft System .....................19,206
Appearance Care ........................410
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) .........19
Assistance Towing .......................101
Auto Unlock, Doors ......................170
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............84,87
Automatic Door Locks ..................31,170
Automatic Transaxle ....................12,278
Automatic Transmission ................278,406
Adding Fluid .........................406
Fluid Level Check ......................406
Fluid Type ...........................433
Gear Ranges ..........................279
Special Additives ......................408
Torque Converter ......................283
460 INDEX
Axle Fluid .............................433
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............409
Battery ..........................385,386,393
Charging ............................377
Emergency Starting .....................377
Gas Caution ..........................377
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......27
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............145
Belts, Seat ..............................41
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............396
B-Pillar Location ........................312
Brake Assist System ......................300
Brake Control System, Electronic .............299
Brake Fluid ............................433
Brake System ...........................405
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................296,299
Fluid Check ..........................405
Master Cylinder .......................405
Parking .............................294
Warning Light .....................206,210
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............279
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........74
Bulb Replacement .......................424
Bulbs, Light ............................423
Calibration, Compass .....................174
Camera, Rear ...........................163
Capacities, Fluid ........................431
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................344
Oil (Engine) ..........................391
Power Steering ........................294
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............402
Car Washes ............................410
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............75,340
Cargo Management System .................193
Cargo Organizer .......................193
INDEX 461
10
Cargo Organizer ........................193
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................346
Cellular Phone ........................88,254
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............428
Certification Label .......................346
Charging ..............................377
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................309
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
. . 388
Child Restraint ........................65,66
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............68,73
Child Seat ..............................70
Circuit Breakers .........................415
Cleaning
Wheels .............................412
Climate Control .........................255
Climate Control, Rear Zone ..............259,265
Clock ........................216,218,221,231
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............253
Compact Spare Tire ......................319
Compass Calibration .....................174
Compass Variance .......................174
Connector
UCI ................................241
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........241
Console, Floor .......................189,192
Console, Overhead ....................165,166
Contract, Service ........................453
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ....385,386,402
Cooling System .........................400
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............401
Coolant Capacity ......................431
Coolant Level ......................400,403
Disposal of Used Coolant ................403
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................400
Inspection ...........................403
Points to Remember ....................404
Pressure Cap .........................402
Radiator Cap .........................402
462 INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......401,431,432
Temperature Gauge .....................204
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............155
Cup Holder ............................190
Customer Assistance .....................451
Data Recorder, Event ......................63
Daytime Running Lights ...................146
Dealer Service ..........................390
Defroster, Rear Window ...................196
Defroster, Windshield ................76,257,263
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................150
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................387
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................205
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................406
Oil (Engine) ..........................390
Power Steering ........................294
Disarming, Theft System ...................19
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............403
Door Locks .............................30
Door Locks, Automatic ....................170
Door Opener, Garage .....................176
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................395
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................290
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......252
E-85 Fuel .............................340
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................85
Electrical Power Outlets ...................185
Electronic Brake Control System .............299
Anti-Lock Brake System .................299
Brake Assist System ....................300
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................302
Electronic Stability Program ...............303
INDEX 463
10
Traction Control System .................300
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............302
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......155
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .........212,303
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................163,167
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............379
Jacking .............................371
Tow Hooks ..........................380
Towing .............................381
Emission Control System Maintenance ......388,436
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................393
Block Heater .........................278
Break-In Recommendations ................74
Compartment ......................385,386
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................432
Exhaust Gas Caution ................40,75,340
Fails to Start ..........................276
Flooded, Starting ......................276
Fuel Requirements .....................431
Jump Starting .........................377
Multi-Displacement .....................294
Oil ...........................390,431,432
Oil Filler Cap ...................385,386,391
Oil Selection .......................391,431
Oil Synthetic .........................392
Starting .............................275
Temperature Gauge .....................204
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Event Data Recorder ......................63
Exhaust Gas Caution ..............40,75,340,398
Exhaust System .......................75,397
Extender, Seat Belt ........................53
Fabric Care ............................412
464 INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................393
Engine Oil ........................392,432
Engine Oil Disposal ....................392
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................368
Turn Signal .....................148,204,425
Flat Tire Stowage .....................370,377
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ........................343
Engine Oil ...........................343
Fuel Requirements ..................340,342
Replacement Parts .....................343
Starting .............................343
Flooded Engine Starting ...................276
Floor Console .......................189,192
Fluid, Brake .........................405,433
Fluid Capacities .........................431
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................406
Brake ...............................405
Engine Oil ...........................390
Power Steering ........................294
Transfer Case .........................408
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........432
Fog Lights ..........................147,429
Folding Rear Seat .....................127,131
Four Wheel Drive .......................284
Operation ...........................284
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................368
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................379
Front Axle (Differential) ...................409
Fuel .................................335
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................344,345
Gauge ..............................204
Octane Rating ......................335,432
Requirements ......................335,431
INDEX 465
10
Tank Capacity ........................431
Fuel, Flexible .............See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................346
Fuses ........................187,415,417,420
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........176
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............344,345,387
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................204
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................335
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................336
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................204
Fuel ................................204
Odometer .........................207,209
Speedometer .........................206
Tachometer ..........................207
Gear Ranges ...........................279
General Information .................18,115,335
Glass Cleaning ..........................414
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............347,350
Gross Cargo Weight ......................346
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................349
GVWR ...............................347
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ..............88
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................290
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................368
Headlights ............................424
Cleaning ............................413
Delay ..............................144
High Beam ...........................149
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........149
Lights On Reminder ....................146
Passing .............................149
Replacing ............................424
Heated Mirrors ..........................87
466 INDEX
Heated Seats ...........................123
Heater ...............................255
Heater, Engine Block .....................278
High Beam Indicator .....................205
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 149
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................353
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 176
Hood Release ..........................140
Ignition .............................12,14
Key.................................12
Lock ................................14
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................15
Infant Restraint ........................65,66
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................325
Information Center ......................167
Information Center, Vehicle .................167
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................84
Instrument Cluster .......................204
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............202
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............414
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............420
Interior Appearance Care ..................413
Interior Fuses ..........................415
Interior Lighting ........................144
Interior Lights ..........................144
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........150
Introduction .............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) .....................188
Jack Operation .......................369,371
Jacking Instructions ......................372
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................17
INDEX 467
10
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................54
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........148,204,425
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................41
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
..68
Life of Tires ............................322
Liftgate ................................37
Lights ..............................77,142
Airbag ............................62,215
Anti-Lock Warning .....................206
Back-Up .............................425
Brake Warning ........................210
Bulb Replacement ...................423,424
Center Mounted Stop ...................428
Courtesy/Reading .....................165
Cruise ..............................215
Daytime Running ......................146
Dome ..............................166
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator .........................212,303
Fog ..........................147,209,429
Hazard Warning Flasher .................368
High Beam ...........................149
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............149
Instrument Cluster .....................204
Interior ..........................144,165
License .............................427
Lights On Reminder ....................146
Low Fuel ............................204
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........212
Passing .............................149
Reading .............................166
Seat Belt Reminder .....................205
Service ..............................423
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........213
468 INDEX
Traction Control .......................303
Turn Signal ........................148,425
Voltage .............................206
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....204
Loading Vehicle .........................346
Tires ...............................312
Locks .................................30
Automatic Door ........................31
Child Protection ........................33
Door ................................30
Ignition ..............................14
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................30
Steering Wheel .........................14
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
..68
Lubrication, Body .......................396
Lug Nuts .............................375
Luggage Carrier .........................197
Lumbar Support ........................121
Maintenance Free Battery ..................393
Maintenance Procedures ...................390
Maintenance Schedule ....................436
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 212,388
Manual, Service .........................455
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection .....................433
Map/Reading Lights ..................165,166
Memory Seat ...........................136
Mirrors ................................84
Automatic Dimming ...................84,87
Electric Powered .......................85
Heated ..............................87
Memory .............................136
Outside ..............................85
Rearview .............................84
Vanity ...............................88
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............328
INDEX 469
10
Mopar Parts .........................389,454
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........294
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............148
Navigation System .......................163
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................74
Occupant Restraints .......................40
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............335
Oil Change Indicator ..................169,208
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................208
Oil, Engine .........................390,432
Capacity ............................431
Change Interval .......................391
Dipstick .............................390
Disposal ............................392
Filter ............................392,432
Filter Disposal ........................392
Identification Logo .....................391
Materials Added to .....................392
Recommendation ...................391,431
Synthetic ............................392
Viscosity ..........................391,431
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............387,388
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........176
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................85
Overdrive ..........................207,281
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................281
Overhead Console ....................165,166
Overheating, Engine ......................205
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........5,455
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................158
Parking Brake ..........................294
Parking On Hill .........................294
Passing Light ...........................149
470 INDEX
Pedals, Adjustable .......................153
Personal Settings ........................170
Pets ..................................74
Pets, Transporting ........................74
Phone, Cellular ..........................88
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) .............88
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........312
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..........385,386,417
Door Locks .........................20,30
Lift Gate .............................38
Mirrors ..............................85
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......185,188
Steering ..........................293,294
Steering Filler Cap ..................385,386
Sunroof .............................183
Windows .............................34
Power Steering Fluid .....................433
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............53
Preparation for Jacking ....................372
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................51
Programmable Electronic Features ............170
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry)
..25
Radial Ply Tires .........................319
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......400,402
Radio Operation ........................254
Radio, Satellite .......................246,251
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................409
Rear Camera ...........................163
Rear Cup Holder ........................192
Rear Liftgate ............................37
Rear Park Sense System ...................158
Rear Window Defroster ...................196
Rear Window Features ....................195
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................195
Rearview Mirrors ........................84
INDEX 471
10
Reclining Front Seats .....................120
Recorder, Event Data ......................63
Recreational Towing ......................362
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......363
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....365
Reformulated Gasoline ....................336
Refrigerant ............................395
Release, Hood ..........................140
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................51
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........252
Remote Starting System ....................28
Replacement Keys ........................17
Replacement Parts .......................389
Replacement Tires .......................323
Reporting Safety Defects ...................454
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........169,208
Restraints, Child .......................65,70
Restraints, Occupant ......................40
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................379
Roll Over Warning ........................4
Roof Type Carrier .......................197
Rotation, Tires ..........................327
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............77
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................454
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................40
Safety Information, Tire ...................307
Safety Tips .............................75
Satellite Radio .......................246,251
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................248
Schedule, Maintenance ....................436
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................414
Seat Belt Reminder .......................51
Seat Belts ..........................40,41,76
And Pregnant Women ...................53
Child Restraint .......................65,66
472 INDEX
Extender .............................53
Front Seat ............................41
Pretensioners ..........................51
Reminder ............................205
Seats .................................120
Adjustment ..........................120
Cleaning ............................412
Fold and Tumble Rear ................125,127
Heated .............................123
Lumbar Support .......................121
Memory .............................136
Rear Folding .......................125,127
Reclining ............................120
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............19,206
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........401,432
Selection of Oil .........................391
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service and Maintenance ..................390
Service Assistance .......................451
Service Contract .........................453
Service Manuals ........................455
Setting the Clock .............216,217,218,221,231
Settings, Personal ........................170
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .................278
Transfer Case .........................284
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................363
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................365
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............46
Shoulder Belts ...........................41
Signals, Turn .....................148,204,425
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................325
Snow Plow ............................362
Snow Tires ............................326
INDEX 473
10
Spare Tire ..........................319,320
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............155
Speedometer ...........................206
Starting ...............................275
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............377
Engine Block Heater ....................278
Engine Fails to Start ....................276
Remote ..............................28
Starting Procedures ......................275
Steering
Column Controls ......................148
Column Lock ..........................14
Power ...........................293,294
Wheel, Tilt ...........................152
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls
. . 252
Storage, Vehicle .........................423
Stuck, Freeing ..........................379
Sun Roof ..............................183
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........325
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................392
System, Remote Starting ....................28
Tachometer ............................207
Taillights ..............................425
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........260
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........204
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............68
Theft System Arming ......................19
Theft System Disarming ....................19
Tilt Steering Column .....................152
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......312,325
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............311
Tire Markings ..........................307
Tire Safety Information ....................307
Tires ............................77,316,456
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................322
Air Pressure ..........................316
Alignment ...........................324
474 INDEX
Chains ..............................325
Changing ............................369
Compact Spare ........................319
General Information ....................316
High Speed ..........................319
Inflation Pressures .....................317
Jacking .............................371
Life of Tires ..........................322
Load Capacity ........................312
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........328
Pressure Warning Light ..................213
Quality Grading .......................456
Radial ..............................319
Replacement .........................323
Rotation .............................327
Safety ...........................307,316
Sizes ...............................309
Snow Tires ...........................326
Spare Tire ...........................370
Spinning ............................321
Tread Wear Indicators ...................321
Wheel Mounting .......................371
Wheel Nut Torque .....................375
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............354
Torque Converter Clutch ..................283
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................380
Towing ...............................349
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............101
Disabled Vehicle .......................381
Guide ..............................354
Recreational ..........................362
Weight ..............................354
Towing Assistance .......................101
Traction ..............................290
Traction Control ......................209,300
Trailer Towing ..........................349
Cooling System Tips ....................361
Hitches .............................353
INDEX 475
10
Minimum Requirements .................355
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................354
Wiring ..............................359
Trailer Towing Guide .....................354
Trailer Weight ..........................354
Transaxle .............................278
Automatic .........................12,278
Operation ...........................278
Transfer Case ...........................408
Fluid ...............................433
Transmission ........................278,406
Automatic ........................278,406
Fluid ...............................433
Maintenance ..........................406
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 176
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Tread Wear Indicators ....................321
Trip Odometer ..........................209
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................216
Turn Signals ......................148,204,425
UCI Connector .........................241
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..............88
Underhood Fuses ........................417
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................456
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 241
Universal Transmitter .....................176
Vanity Mirrors ...........................88
Variance, Compass .......................174
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............7
Vehicle Information Center .................167
Vehicle Loading ......................312,346
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............8
Vehicle Storage .........................423
476 INDEX
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................252
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............115
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............204
Warning, Roll Over ........................4
Warnings and Cautions .....................7
Warranty Information .....................454
Washer, Adding Fluid ..................385,386
Washers, Windshield .....................151
Washing Vehicle .........................410
Water
Driving Through ......................290
Weight Load Carrying ....................346
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............324
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................412
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................412
Wheel Changing ........................369
Wheel Mounting ........................371
Wheel Nut Torque .......................375
Wind Buffeting .........................184
Window Fogging ........................267
Windows ..............................34
Power ...............................34
Windshield Defroster ..................257,263
Windshield Washers ................150,151,397
Fluid .......................150,385,386,397
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................396
Windshield Wipers .......................150
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................396
Wiper, Rear ............................195
Wipers, Intermittent ......................150
Wrecker Towing .........................381
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure ......412
INDEX 477
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler LLC
81-026-0952
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2009 ASPEN
ASPEN
2009 OWNER’S MANUAL
